‫ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻲ ﺍﻣﻴﺮﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻜﺪﻩ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪Microsoft Project 2010‬‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪ :‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻣﺤﻤﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﻭﺯﻱ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻔﻨﺪ ‪91‬‬
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬
 ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ‪ .....................................................................................................................................................‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬

‫‪-1‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪4 ...............................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-2‬ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ‪4 .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-3‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5 .........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-1-3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪5 ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-2-3‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪6 ...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-3-3‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪7 ...............................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-4-3‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪11 ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-5-3‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪11 ...........................................................................‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪17 .................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-5‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ‪20 ......................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-6‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ‪26 .......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪7-‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ‪31 ............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-8‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪32 ..............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-9‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪41 .............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-10‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪45 .............................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-1-10‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ‪49 ......................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-2-10‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ )‪55 ............................................................................................... (Automatic‬‬
‫‪-11‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )‪57 .................................................................................................(BaseLine‬‬
 ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪-12‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ‪59 ............................................................................ :‬‬

‫‪-13‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ‪62 ..................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-14‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ‪66..........................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-15‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪71 .................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪-16‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪74 ................................................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ -17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪75 ...................................................................................................................................................‬‬
 ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪- 1‬ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﻢ ﻗﺮﻥ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺷﻜﻞﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻪ‬
‫"ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﺪﺭﻥ" ﺷﻜﻞ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺜﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻮﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻭﺯﻩ ﺭﻭﻳﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺪﺭﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻘﺎء ﻭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﺴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻴﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺷﺪ ﺭﻭﻳﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﻭ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻔﺎﻫﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻼﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺭﺯﻧﺪﻩﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺭﻭﻳﻜﺮﺩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻨﻴﻚﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻳﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﺷﺪ ﭼﺸﻤﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮژﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ Microsoft project‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﺍﻳﻨﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻮﺯﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ ،MSP‬ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﺻﻨﺎﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺪﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻗﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 2‬ﻧﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮔﺬﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪﻱ ‪ WBS‬ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺳﻌﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 3‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬

‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻓﻖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻼﺷﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻴﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪﻱ "ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ" ﻳﺎ ‪ WBS‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - -1 3‬ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫"ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ" ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻘﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺳﻲ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﻱ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﺡ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﺎ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰء ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ :‬ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪F‬‬‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ "ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪0‬‬
 ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻥ ﺍﻮ ﻨﻋ‬ ‫ﻩﺭ ﺎﻤﺷ‬

‫ﺢﻄ ﺳ‬ ‫ﺢﻄﺳ‬

‫ﻊ ﻣﺎﺟ ﻪﻣ ﺎ ﻧﺮ ﺑ‬ ‫‪1‬‬

‫ﺎﻫ ﻩژﻭﺮﭘ‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﻲ ﺘ ﻳ ﺮﻳﺪ ﻣ ﺡﻮﻄ ﺳ‬

‫ﻒ ﻳﺎﻇ ﻭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﻒﻳ ﺎﻇﻭ ﺮﻳ ﺯ‬ ‫‪4‬‬

‫ﻱ ﺭ ﺎ ﻛﻱﺎ ﻫ ﻪﺘﺴ‬ ‫ﻲ ﻨ ﻓ ﺡﻮﻄ ﺳ ‪5‬‬

‫ﻲ ﻧﺎﺒﻴﺘﺸﭘ ﻱﺎ ﻬﺘﻴ‬
‫)‪(LOE‬‬
‫‪6‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - -3 3‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ‪ 3‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ "ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫‪8‬‬
 ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺬﻳﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻜﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﺖ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺭﻳﺴﻚ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺟﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺻﺤﻴﺢﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻛﻮﭼﻜﺘﺮ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ًﻻ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻲﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻫﻢ ﺑﺮﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻮﭼﻚ ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ‪ 80‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ 2‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺮ ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ "ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺍﺻـﻠﻲ" ﺍﺳـﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻇـﺎﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺸـﺮﻓﺖ ﻋﻤﻠـﻲ ﭘـﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑـﺎ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻓﺮﻣﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱﻫﺎ ﻋﻤﺪﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ "ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ " ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴـﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻔﺮ ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑـﻪ ﺁﺳـﺎﻧﻲ ﻳـﻚ ﺑﺴـﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﺸﺨﺼـﻲ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ )ﺭﻳﺎﻝ( ﻳﺎ ﻧﻔـﺮ ‪ -‬ﺳـﺎﻋﺖ ﻳـﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﻱ ﻛـﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑـﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬـﺎﻱ ﻛﻮﺗـﺎﻫﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴـﻞ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺍﺝ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮓ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﻢ ﻣﺬﺍﻛﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺬﺍﻛﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﺒﺎﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻴﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻻﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪- -4 3‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺮ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪﻱ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻭﺵﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻓﻴﺰﻳﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﺎ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪/‬ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪/‬ﺁﺯﻣﺎﻳﺶ‪/‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﺎﺯﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺠﺰﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻔﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - 5‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪- 3‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﺕ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﻨﺎﺳـﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴـﻴﻢ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺸـﻨﻬﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪F‬‬ ‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ‪" ،‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﻤـﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪9‬‬
 ‫‪12‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺘﻤﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﺳﻠﺴﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺒﻲ )ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻭﻝ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ )ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ(‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺘﻲ ﺑﻪﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﻜﺮﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻚ "ﻓﺮﻫﻨﮓ ﻟﻐـﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺻـﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ" ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﺴـﺖ ﻛـﺎﺭ ﺗﻬﻴـﻪ ﻧﻤـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻌـﺎﺭﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺫﻛﺮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻣﻨﺪﻳﻬﺎﻱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴـﺖﻫـﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎ ﺟﻤﻊ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻄﺢﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘـﻲ )ﺳﻠﺴـﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺒـﻲ( ﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺒﻲ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑـﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺑﺨﺶ‪) ،‬ﺩﭘﺎﺭﺗﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ( ‪،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳـﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺒﻜﻪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺟﺰﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻳـﻚ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪ ﻣﺸـﺨﺺ ﺍﺯ ﭼـﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣـﺎﻟﻲ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺷـﺒﻜﻪ ﻣﻤﻜـﻦ ﺍﺳـﺖ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺘﺪﻭﻟﻮژﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪ 2 ، 1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴـﻴﻢ ﻛـﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ‪ 4‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺟـﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛـﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟـﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳـﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪13‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ -1‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ‪WBS‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ‬
‫ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬
‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺧﺔ ﺣﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻼﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ(‬
‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬

‫‪12F‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬

‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬

‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬

‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ‬

‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﺭﻭﺵ "ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ" ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺧـﺮﺩ ﻣـﻲﻛﻨـﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳـﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑـﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 2‬ﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺰﺭگﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺵ ﭼﺮﺧﺔ ﺣﻴـﺎﺕ ﻛـﻪ ﻣﺸـﺎﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺟﺮﻳـﺎﻥ ﻣـﻲﺑﺎﺷـﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻼﺗﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪﺳﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻭﻇـﺎﻳﻒ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣـﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻴـﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺘﺮﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻬﻴﻪﻱ ‪ ،WBS‬ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ )ﺩﺳﺘﺎﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎﻱ( ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲ‪-‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻱ "ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ" ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺳﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ "ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ"‪" ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﻭ‬
‫"ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ"‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻲ ‪ WBS‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺘﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻇﺎﻳﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪11 -Organization‬‬
‫‪12 -Life Cycle‬‬
‫‪13 -Flow‬‬
 ‫‪14‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﻣﻮﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭﺭﮔﻼژﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻭ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺕ‬

‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻃﺮﺡ ‪ WBS‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP2010‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ "ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ"‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪Gantt‬‬
‫‪ Chart‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ WBS‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Task Name‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬

‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻨﻲ‬

‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺧﺎﻣﻮﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭﺭﮔﻼژﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬

‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻭ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﻨﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻫﺎﻭ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺷﻲ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺕ‬

‫ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P01‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳــــﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Task Name‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻄﺢﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ " ‪ "Outline‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻱ "ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ " ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫‪F13‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ‪ 15‬ﻭ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 16‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪F15‬‬ ‫‪F 14‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻــﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬

‫‪14 - Work Package‬‬

‫‪15 - Summary Task‬‬
‫‪16 - Sub Task‬‬
 ‫‪16‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫)ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ‪ 15‬ﺗﺎ ‪ (19‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭼﭗ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Ctrl‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﭼﭗ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Shift‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Indent‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 15‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 19‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪) 14‬ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ( ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪Indent‬‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Outdent‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﮔﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﻳﺮﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ " ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ" ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ"ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ" ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ )ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪6،2‬ﻭ‪ (14‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Indent‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ‪ WBS‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪"P02‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﺮ "ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ" ﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫‪ Show Subtask‬ﻭ ‪ Hide Subtask‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪17‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ‪ WBS‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ‪ WBS‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪WBS‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ View‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Outline‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Show‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺳﻄﺢ )‪ (level‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )‪ (Summary Task‬ﻭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ )‪ (Sub Task‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ Milestone‬ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Milestone‬ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻘﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻬﻢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻬﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ Milestone‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪ ‪ Task Information‬ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺐ )ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ( ‪ Advanced‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Mark task as milestone‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ ok‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Milestone‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﺯﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 4‬ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻧﺪﻫﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ WBS‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Projet Information‬ﻛﻠﻴﻠﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Start date‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺤﺚ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫• ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﻨﺠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺭﺯﻳﺎﺑﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺳﻨﺠﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ "ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ" ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬ ‫• ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪F16‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺳﻮﺍﺑﻖ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﺎ ﻧﺎﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪ : 18‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ‪ "،‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ‪ " 19‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫‪F18‬‬ ‫‪F17‬‬

‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﺎﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻳﻪ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻋﻲ ﻗﻀﺎﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺷﺎﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﻴﻦ‪،‬ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﺨﺼﺺ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻧﻈﻴﺮ ﺣﺪﺱ ﻭ ﮔﻤﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺒﺘﻨﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻛﻤﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻫﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Duration‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ "ﺭﻭﺯ" ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Option‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺐ )ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫‪ Schedule‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Duration is entered in‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪17 - Expert Judgment‬‬

‫‪18 - Analogous Estimating‬‬
‫‪19 - Top-Down Estimating‬‬
 ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪- 5‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬

‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻴﻼﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﺸﻮﺭ ﺍﻳﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Change Working Time‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Create New Calendar‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭﻳﮋﻩﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪Standard‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Change Working Time‬ﺩﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻣﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ Work Weeks‬ﻭ ‪ Exceptions‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Work Week‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪22‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Name‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ]‪ [Default‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Details‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ]‪ Details for [Default‬ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪Use Project default times for these days‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬

‫ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 8-12‬ﺻﺒﺢ ﻭ ‪ 13-17‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ‬

‫‪Set days to nonworking time‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ‪.‬‬

‫‪Set day(s) to these specific working times‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻨﺠﺸﻨﺒﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ]‪ Details for [Default‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ ) Sunday‬ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ ( ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼـﭗ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ) …‪ (Set day(s) to these‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ From‬ﻭ ‪ To‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪From‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 8‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ To‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 12‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ From‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 13‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ To‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 17‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪) Saturday‬ﺷﻨﺒﻪ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ )‪ (Friday‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺷﻤﺴﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﻭﻡ )‪ (Set days to nonworking time‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ﭘﻨﺠﺸﻨﺒﻪ )‪ (Tursday‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺩﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ From/To‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ]‪ Details for [Default‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻳﺎﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Exceptions‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Name‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ " ﻋﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺭﻭﺯ"( ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Start‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 20‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ( ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Finish‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻳﺎﻡ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Start‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻠﺶ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈـــﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺎﻫﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ‬
 ‫‪25‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Finish‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 23‬ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 20‬ﺗﺎ ‪23‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺭﺱ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Exception‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Name‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﻭﺯ)ﻫﺎﻱ( ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Details‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Working Time‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ From/To‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،Exceptions‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Recurrence pattern‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﻭﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻜـــﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Yearly‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Range of recurrence‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Start‬ﻭ ‪ End by‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﭘﺮﻳﻮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ End after‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻼﺕ ﻧﻮﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻲﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 6‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P03‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ‪ - 20‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ A‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫‪19F‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪A‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﻱ ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺟﺎﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪A‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬
‫‪F20‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻣﺬﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪20 - Start to Start‬‬

‫‪21 - Finish to Finish‬‬
 ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : A‬ﺣﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺧﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺫﻭﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫‪ : B‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺰﺭگ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩﺧﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻟﻪ‪-‬‬
‫ﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻮﺭﻩ ﺭﻳﺨﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ) ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻫﻤﻪﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﻲ ﺫﻭﺏ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ A‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﺳﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ‪ - 22‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ A‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‬
‫‪F21‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ ، A‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ‬
‫ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻳﻬﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﻣﻴﺰﻱ ) ‪ ( A‬ﺑﮕﺬﺭﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﻧﺘﺎژ ) ‪ (B‬ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ B‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪A‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪F2‬‬

‫ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺷﻴﻔﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ A‬ﻭ ‪ B‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ : A‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺻﺒﺢ‬
‫‪ : B‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺷﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺷﺐ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺻﺒﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺻﺒﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﻛﻨﺎﻥ ﺷﻴﻔﺖ ﺷﺐ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺪﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ‪.‬‬

‫‪22 - Finish to Start‬‬

‫‪23 - Start to Finish‬‬
 ‫‪28‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ‪ FS‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﺍﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺵ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ FS‬ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺰﻣﺎﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ (.‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪3‬ﻭ‪4‬ﻭ‪5‬ﻭ‪7‬ﻭ‪ 8‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ‪ link Task‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ FS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 13‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ‪ FS‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲ‬ ‫ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 12‬ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪13‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 12‬ﻭ ‪ 13‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ‪ FS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 18‬ﻭ ‪ 19‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ FS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ‬
‫‪ 19‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Predecessors‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 18‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Enter‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 18‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ 19‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ FS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ Show Split‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Show Split‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪29‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ " ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ" ﺩﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧــﻤـﺎﻱ "‪ "Resources & Predecessors‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ‪ Show Split‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧــﻤـﺎﻱ "‪ "Resources & Predecessors‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪،‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 15‬ﻭ ‪ 16‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ SS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 16‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ "ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ" ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 16‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮ ﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺁﻥ )‪ (Predecessors Name‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫‪ 15‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺁﻥ )‪ (ID‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 15‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ‪ SS‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Lag‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺟﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ(‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Split‬ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ‪ Show Split‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 8‬ﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﻱ ‪ SS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 9‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Task Information‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Task Information‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Predecessors‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ ID‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻀﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 8‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Task Name‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ‪ SS‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﺟﻪﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Lag‬ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻼ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ( ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 8‬ﻭ ‪ 9‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ SS‬ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P04‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 7‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪Task Information‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Task Information‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺐ ‪ Advanced‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ Constraint type‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : As Late As Possible‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺩ )‪ (Late Start‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : As Soon As Possible‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺩ )‪ (Early Start‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪).‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪(.‬‬
 ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : Finish No Earlier Than‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬

‫‪ Constraint date‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Finish No Later Than‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Constraint‬‬
‫‪ date‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Must Finish On‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Constraint date‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Must Start on‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Constraint date‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Start No Earlier Than‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺯﻭﺩﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Constraint‬‬
‫‪ date‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Start No Later Than‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Constraint‬‬
‫‪ date‬ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ‪ :‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ As Late As possible‬ﻭ ‪ As Soon As possible‬ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻟﺬﺍ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ‪ Constraint date‬ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻫﻴﭻ ﮔﺎﻩ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ ، Gantt Chart‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ )‪ I (Indicators‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ‬
‫ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻖ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 8‬ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺗﺨﺎﺫ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪33‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Recouree Sheet‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ :‬ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ‪،‬ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ‪،‬ﺗﻜﻨﺴﻴﻦ ‪،‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﻫﺮ ﻭ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﺪﻭﺯﺭ ﻭ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻫﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻭ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻣﻮﺭﻳﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪Work‬‬
‫‪Material‬‬
‫‪Cost‬‬
‫‪ : Work‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ : Material‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Cost‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻘﺪﻳﻨﮕﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 16‬ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ‪ Cost‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .11‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .12‬ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ .2‬ﻟﻮﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ .13‬ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ .3‬ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ‬
‫‪ .14‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪ .4‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .15‬ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ .5‬ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﺁﻫﻦ ﺁﻻﺕ‬ ‫‪ .6‬ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ .17‬ﺁﺟﺮ‬ ‫‪ .7‬ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫‪ .18‬ﺑﺘﻦ‪350‬‬ ‫‪ .8‬ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .19‬ﺑﺘﻦ ‪250‬‬ ‫‪ .9‬ﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ .20‬ﺗﻨﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪ .10‬ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻴﻜﺴﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Recouree Sheet‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒـﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣـﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ : Resource Name‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ : Type‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Material،Work‬ﻭ ‪ Cost‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺫﻛﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬

‫ﻟﻮﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺁﻫﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺁﻻﺕ‬
‫‪Mat‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺟﺮ‬ ‫‪erial‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺘﻦ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻦ‪350‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﻮﻥ‬ ‫‪Work‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻦ ‪250‬‬
‫ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬ ‫‪Cost‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻴﻜﺴﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ‬

‫‪ : Material Label‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪Material‬‬

‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻼ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ "ﻛﻴﻠـﻮ ﮔـﺮﻡ"‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : Initials‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Group‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﻤﭗ ﺑﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﺘﻦﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Max Units‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Work‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ " ‪ " %‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ "ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ" ﻧﻴﺰ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Tools‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Option‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺐ )ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ(‬
‫‪ Schedule‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Show assignment Units as a:‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪ Percentage‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Decimal‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Std. Rate‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ، Work‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Material‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ "ﺩﻻﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ" ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Project Options‬ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ Display‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ … ‪ Currency option for‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ Currency‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ IRR‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Decimal digits‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻋﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﭘﻮﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ General‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ … ‪ General option for‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻛﺲ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ Default standard rate‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ " ‪/h‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪ " 0,00‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫" ‪/min‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪" 0,00‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫" ‪/h‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪" 0,00‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
 ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫" ‪/day‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪" 0,00‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫" ‪/wk‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪" 0,00‬‬
‫ﻫﻔﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫" ‪/mon‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪" 0,00‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫" ‪/yr‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ‪" 0,00‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Ovt. Rate‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Work‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 30000‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ )ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ( ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺣﻖﺍﻟﺰﺣﻤﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺯﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ‪ 50000‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ )ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ( ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺴﺎﺑﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺮﺥﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﻤﺰﺩ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺭﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻟﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ‪ 1/4‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Cost/use‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻌﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻠﺰﻡ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ‪ ù‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ø‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ »ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﻱ« ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪Std.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫‪ Rate‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﺟﺮﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﺠﺰﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Accrue At‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ : Prorated‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫• ‪ : Start‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫• ‪ : End‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫‪ :Base Calendar‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Work‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
 ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Change Working Time‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪Create New‬‬
‫‪ Calendar‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘــﻮﻳﻢ ﭘﻴـﺶ ﻓـﺮﺽ ﻧـﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺗﻐـﻴـﻴـﺮ ﺩﻫــﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳـــــﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Create new base calendar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫‪ Make a copy of … … .calendar‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Change Working Time‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻤﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Code‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻛﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫"‪ "P05‬ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource Information‬ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪﻱ ‪ General‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪39‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Resource Availability‬ﺑﺎﺯﻩﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Availabe From‬ﻭ ‪ Availabe To‬ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Units‬ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺎﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻜﺪﻳﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪Resource Information‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ )ﺗﺐ( ‪ Costs‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‬
 ‫‪40‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﺮ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬

‫‪ Cost rate tables‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ A‬ﺗﺎ ‪ E‬ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ‪20،000‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ‪ 22،000‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ‪ 23،000‬ﺭﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﻱ ‪ B ،A‬ﻭ‪ C‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪Standard Rate‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Effective Date‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﺎﺑﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Effective Date‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Effective Date‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ standarc Ratc‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ )ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ( ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Effective Date‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Effective Date‬ﻗﻴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource Sheet‬ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪41‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪- 9‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪"P05‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -1‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Task Information‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ )ﺗﺐ( ‪ Recources‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ ،Recources Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Units‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Work‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Cost‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -2‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Split‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ "‪ "Resources & Predecessors‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳـﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Resource Name‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ )ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ( ﺭﻭﻱ‬
 ‫‪42‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Name‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ ،Resource Name‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Units‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -3‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Resource‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ Assign Resources‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ Alt‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ‪ Fl0‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ Assign Resources‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Assign Resources‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Task‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ …‪ Resources From‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Assign‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Unite‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬
 ‫‪43‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Close‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-4‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Resource Name‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻫﺮﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﻳﺮﮔﻮﻝ "‪ "،‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ ، Work‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Material‬ﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Cost‬ﺻﻔﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻣﻲ‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺮﻭﺷﻪ " ][" ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﮔﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﮕﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P06‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪﻱ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Task usage‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪44‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 3‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺸﻪﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Assignment information‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪45‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Cost rate table‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ A‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ 7‬ﻭ ‪ 15‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 7‬ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 15‬ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ C‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 10‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ‪ work‬ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪Work = Unit × Duration‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺿﺮﺑﺪﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﻲ "ﻛﺎﺭ" ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ "ﻛﺎﺭ" ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(Fixed Duration) .‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪(Fixed Units) .‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ" ﻛﺎﺭ" ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪( Fixed Work) .‬‬
 ‫‪46‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺷﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 10‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻲ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺖ ‪ 100‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪ 8‬ﻣﺘﺮ‬
‫)‪ 800‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻜﻌﺐ( ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺗﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻙ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪" 80‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ˚ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ" ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ‪ 10‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﺪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺩﺭ‪ -‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪Work = 80‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ‪Unit = 1‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ‪Duration = 10‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﺎﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ )‪ (Duration=5‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ‪ W= U × D‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻮﺩﺭﻫﺎ )‪ (U‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻗﻞ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺍﻧﻪ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ‪ 16 ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ )ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ( ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖﻫﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮﻭﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺁﺯﺍﺭ ﻫﻤﺴﺎﻳﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 16‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻪﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﻓﺮﻣﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺍﺻﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﻮﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪8‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ‪ 16‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﻛﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Units ،Duration‬ﻳﺎ ‪Work‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Fixed Units‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ‪:‬‬
‫‪47‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Options‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Project Options‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ Schedule‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Default task type‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ Fixed Duration‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Fixed Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ Task Information‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Task Information‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﺐ ‪Advanced‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Task type‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Fixed Duration‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ Fixed Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫• ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Split‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Task type‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ‪ Fixed Duration‬ﻳﺎ ‪Fixed‬‬
‫‪ Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪﻱ ﻣﻬﻢ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻧﺎﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،work‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‬
 ‫‪48‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﻱ ﺫﻛﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪،(W= U× D‬‬
‫ﮔﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ splite‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺁﺷﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪) Effort driven‬ﺗﻼﺵﮔﺮﺍ( ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ‪ work‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﺸﺮﻳﺢ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P07‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Resource sheet‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺯﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻳﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳـﺘﺮﺱ ﻛﻤﺘـﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣـﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺻـــﻄﻼﺡ‬
‫‪ Over Allocation‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ OA‬ﻧﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬
 ‫‪49‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ view‬ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﻛـﻠﻴـﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤـﻪﻱ‬

‫‪ Resource usage‬ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - -1 10‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ "ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ" ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ "ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ" ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﻭﻝ )ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ( ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ Scroll to task‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ "ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ" ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ )ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ‪ 2‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 8‬ﻭ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﺎﺯﺩﻫﻢ ﻭ ﺳﻴﺰﺩﻫﻢ ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 13‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 13‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎ ‪ 16‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﺣﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Split‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
 ‫‪50‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Start‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ " ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ " ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 13‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ 14‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ( ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 14‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺣﺎﺋﺰ ﺍﻫﻤﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻬﺎﻱ ﺭﻓﻊ ‪ OA‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ " ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ " ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ )‪ 13‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ OA‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ "ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ" ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Split‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ Resource usage‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ ‪ Split‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪51‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Work‬ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺒﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ‪ OA‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Work‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Split‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Ovt.Work‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Ovt.Work‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
 ‫‪52‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ …‪ Detail styles‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑـﺎﻧـﻪﻱ ‪ Usage Details‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴـﻤـﺖ ‪ Available fields‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻋـﺒـﺎﺭﺕ‬

‫‪ Overtime Work‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Show‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ‪ Ovt.Work‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Work‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﺥ ﻧﺪﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺖ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻳﻢ )ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 11‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ( ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪53‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Split‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ "ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ" ﭼﭗ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Gant Chart‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫"ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ" ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Task‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻦ ‪ Split Task‬ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺁﻣﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻜﺸﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ )‪ 15‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ( ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺱ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 13‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Resource usage‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻣﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 13‬ﺩﺳﺎﻣﺒﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺮ ‪ Work‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪55‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ - -2 10‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ )‪(Automatic‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺴﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﻤﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Resources‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Leveling Options‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Leveling calculations‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Automatic‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬

‫‪ Look for overallocatlons on a‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Day by Day‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ Level now‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 9‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 3‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ‪4‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ Resource usage‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ‪ Work‬ﻣﺮ ﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
 ‫‪56‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻋﻤﻼ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪) ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻜﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺟﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻭ ﺗﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩﻱ ‪ Resource Leveling‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : Automatic‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Manual‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Look for overallocations on a … … … … . basis‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﭼﻚ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Clear leveling values before leveling‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Level entire project‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Level From-To‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Leveling order‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Level only within available slack‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Leveling can create splits in remaining work‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪57‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : Clear Leveling‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺎﻙ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Level Now‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 11‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )‪(BaseLine‬‬

‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺗﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ )ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ( ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P08‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Set BaseLine‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪58‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ set baseLine‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 11‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ BaseLine‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Set interim plan‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺨﺸﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴـﻤـﺖ ‪ Entier project‬ﻣـﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻃــﻼﻋـﺎﺕ ﻣـﺸــﺨﺺ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗــﺴﻤــﺖ‬
‫‪ Set interim plan‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Selected‬‬
‫‪ tasks‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Gantt Chart Wizard‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Next‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ BaseLine‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻬﺎﻱ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻭ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ (BaseLine‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
 ‫‪59‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ - 12‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ " ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺟﺎﺭﻱ" ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﭘﺮﻭﻩ‬
‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ …‪ Save As‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪Current‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ File‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ …‪ Save As‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ Current‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ Plan‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭ ‪ Plan‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻱ ﻣﺒﻨﺎﻱ ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻧﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ "ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﺳﻜﻠﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻥ " ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ (2008/11/23‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ 2008/12/13‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻧﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪ 3‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﻲ ‪ 2‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ 6‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 2008/12/13‬ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﻲﺷﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻢ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻫﻢ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭ ‪ ،Plan‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ % Complet‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ) ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪(Start‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪60‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Insert Column‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪،Field name‬‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ % Complete‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ % Complete‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Start‬ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 0%‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2008/12/13‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻲ ﻣﻲﺩﺍﺷﺖ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪﻱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،Plan‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Update Project‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪61‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Update work as complete through‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪" ،‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ" ﻳﺎ "‪ "Status Date‬ﻣﻲﮔﻮﻳﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﻱ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ set 0% - 100% complete‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻴﻤﻪﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺑﻪﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶﺩﺍﺩﻩﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ set 0% or 100% complete only‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Reschedule uncompleted work to start after‬ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ For‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Entire project‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ selected Tasks‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Update work as complete through‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2008/12/13‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ %complet‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﺍﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﻠﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪ 2008/12/13‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ % Complete‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ )ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺍﻭﻝ( ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲﺑﻴﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2008/12/13‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ‪ 18‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ‪-‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ )‪ % Complete‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ (Plan‬ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 17‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬
‫)‪ % Complete‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪.(Current‬‬
 ‫‪62‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 13‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﻞ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺣﺚ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ ﺩﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺯﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ Insert Column‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ ،Field name‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Number 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Customize Fields‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪63‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Costom Field‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Field‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Number 1‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Rename‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Rename Fields‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ﺭﺍ ‪ Weight‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Costom Field‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ ،Calculation for task and group summary rows‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ Rollup‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎ ‪ Sum‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭﺯﻥﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ OK .‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Weight‬ﻭﺯﻥ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪ 100‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪64‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Number 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪ Customize Fields‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ Number 2‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ % P.W‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Custom attributes‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ Formula‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪Formula‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﻱ ﺑﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪( %Complete ×Number 1)/100‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ "(" ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
 ‫‪65‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Field‬ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ Number‬ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ %Complete‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ "*" ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻃﺒـــﻖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛـــﻤﻪ ‪ Field‬ﺳﭙــﺲ ‪ Number‬ﻭ ﭘــﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ‪Custom‬‬
‫‪ Number‬ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Number 1‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ")" ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ Costom Field‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ … ‪ Calculation for task‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ Rollup‬ﻭ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ‪ sum‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
 ‫‪66‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ %P.W‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺯﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺯﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P09‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 14‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ‬

‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭ ‪ Plan‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﻨﺪﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : Baseline Cost‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Baseline Cost‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭ ‪ Plan‬ﻳﻜﺴﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 24 BCWS‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺤﺚ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ‬‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬

‫ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ )‪ ،(Status Date‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ BCWS‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪ‪-‬‬

‫ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ BCWS‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪BCWS‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ BCWS‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ BCWS‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ % Complete‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ BCWS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ : 25 BCWP‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ )ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ(‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ )‪ ،(Status Date‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ BCWP‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬

‫ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ‬

‫‪24- budgeted cost of work scheduled‬‬

‫‪25- budgeted cost of work performed‬‬
 ‫‪67‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ BCWP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬
‫= ‪BCWP‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ BCWP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ BCWP‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ % Complete‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ BCWP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ : Cost‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Cost‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭ ‪ Plan‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﺷﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : 26 ACWP‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ )ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ(‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪F‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ )‪ ،(Status Date‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ ACWP‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ‬

‫ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺻﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ ACWP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﺳﺒﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫= ‪ACWP‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ ACWP‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ ACWP‬ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﻓﻮﻕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ % Complete‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ ACWP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ (Status curve) S-curve‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪26- actual cost of work performed‬‬

 ‫‪68‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ S-curve‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ‪ ACWP ، BCWS ،‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Excell‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ )ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺕ( ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ‪ s-curve‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺳﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪%Complete‬‬ ‫‪BCWS‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪2‬‬
‫‪...‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Plan‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪%Complete‬‬ ‫‪ACWP‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪2‬‬
‫‪...‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪n‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭ ‪ Plan‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻼ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪2008/12/13‬‬
‫ﺑﻪﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ 1‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ %Complete‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ BCWS‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Plan‬ﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ‪ ACWP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪69‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 2009/1/3‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ‪ 20‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺗﺴﻄﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺭﮔﻼژﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" )ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ (9‬ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 6‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﻣﮕﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ")ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ (11‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ 6‬ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 7‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Duration‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 2009/1/3‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2009/1/23‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺭﻣﺎﺗﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺕ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" )ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪(12‬‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ "ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻮﻧﺪﺍﺳﻴﻮﻥ" )ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ (13‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ‪ 20‬ﺭﻭﺯ ‪ 25‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Current‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ 2009/1/23‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺧﺼﻬﺎﻱ‪ BCWS‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ACWP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ‪ plan‬ﻭ ‪ Current‬ﺑﻴﺎﺑﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪%Complete‬‬ ‫‪BCWS‬‬
‫‪2008/12/13‬‬ ‫‪%18‬‬ ‫‪840،161،000‬‬
‫‪2009/1/3‬‬ ‫‪%62‬‬ ‫‪600،364،000‬‬
‫‪2009/1/23‬‬ ‫‪%80‬‬ ‫‪240،778،000‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺧﺺ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬

‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪%Complete‬‬ ‫‪ACWP‬‬
‫‪2008/12/13‬‬ ‫‪%17‬‬ ‫‪680،137،000‬‬
‫‪2009/1/3‬‬ ‫‪%34‬‬ ‫‪360،176،000‬‬
‫‪2009/1/23‬‬ ‫‪%50‬‬ ‫‪000،299،000‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪70‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬
 ‫‪71‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪- 15‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﺭﺳﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻃﺮﺡ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Group by‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪:‬‬

‫‪ :Active v.Inactive‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Active‬ﻭ ‪ Inactive‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﺠﺰﺍ‬

‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Inactive‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ‪ Inactive‬ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ General‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪Task‬‬
‫‪ information‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Auto Scheduled v. Manually Scheduled‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ General‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ Task information‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪Schedule Mode‬‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Manually Scheduled‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Complete and Incomplete Tasks‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ‪ (%100‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Constraint Type‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Critical‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Duration‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‬
‫‪ :Duration then Priority‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ :Milestones‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﺴﺘﻮﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ : Priority‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‬
 ‫‪72‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ :Priority Keeping Outline Structure‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻭﻟﻮﻳﺖ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺗﺒﻲ ‪WBS‬‬
‫‪ :Resource‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Status‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ ،(Complete‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ‬
‫)‪ (On Schedule‬ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ )‪ (Future Task‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Group by‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪No Group‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻫﻲ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ WBS‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ‪ WBS‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺣﺘﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻛﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬

‫ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻛﺪ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺍﻛﺘﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫"‪"Su‬‬ ‫"‪"Bu‬‬ ‫"‪"Pr‬‬ ‫"‪"De‬‬
‫)ﺳﻪ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ(‬

‫ﻣﺜﻼً ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ‪) 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺸﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺩﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻱ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻛﺪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪( -1 De 003‬‬
 ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻚ ﺗﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺳﻪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ TXT2 ، TXT1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪TXT3‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻼ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ(‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ Title‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Text1‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ Stage‬ﻭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ‪ Text2‬ﻭ ‪ Text 3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻧﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Type‬ﻭ ‪ Serial‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺒﻘﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮﺯﻣﻴﻦ )‪ ˚ 1‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ( ﻟﺬﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪Stage‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ -1‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ ،Type‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪ‪.‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ‪ ،De‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺖ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ‪ Pr‬ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ‪ Bu‬ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫)ﺍﺻﻠﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺪ ‪ Su‬ﻛﺪ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P10‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ view‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Group by‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ New Groups‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ More Groups‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ New‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‬
‫‪ Field Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻥﻫﺎ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫‪U‬‬ ‫‪U‬‬

‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‪ Group By‬ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ‪ Text 3‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ Show in menu‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ More Groups‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Apply‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﻱ ﻛﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﻱ ﻛﺪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 16‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬

‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ "‪ "P11‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻛﻤﻚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ view‬ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Filtered by‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Active‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Active‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ‪ Inactive‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Complete Tasks‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Critical‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺨﻔﻲ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Date Range‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﺯﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Incomplete Task‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Late Task‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Milestones‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ )‪ (Milestones‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Summary Tasks‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ )‪ (Summary‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪75‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : Task Range‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Task With Estimated Durations‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺨﻤﻴﻨﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Duration‬ﺑﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ؟ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Using Resource‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﺑﺴﺎﺯﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ View‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Filtered‬ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ‪ More Filters‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ New‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﺪ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺯﻥ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Name‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ ،Field Name‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ %Complete‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Text‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﻧﺎﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻭ ‪ ( ...‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ‪ equals‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Values‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺩﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ And/or‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ And‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ Field Name‬ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ Weight‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪Text‬‬
 ‫‪76‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪﻱ ‪ is less than‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ values‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪﻱ ‪ Apply‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺻﺪﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻛﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5‬ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ No Filtered‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪- 17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﭘﺮﻳﻨﺖ )ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﺓ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ )ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﭘﺬﻳﺮ( ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺁﻣﻮﺧﺖ ﻛﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﺎَ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﻄﺮﻱ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻲ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ )ﻭﻳﮋﻭﺍﻝ(‪ :‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ًﻻ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Visio‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Excel‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ‪ 2007‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ - -1 17‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻙ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻜﺴﺮﻱ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻣﻮﺭ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (Cost‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Reports‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪77‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Selert‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﭘﺮﻳﻨﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Print‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ -1-1-17‬ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ‪Overview‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ 5‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ : Project Summary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻼﺻﺔ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﻠﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Top-Level Tasks‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺩﺭﺻﺪ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪Top-level Tasks‬ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Select‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ ،Top-Level‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Edit‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﺔ ‪ Definition‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ ،Filter‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ‪ All Tasks‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ Summary task‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺭ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑﮕﻨﺠﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺯ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ Summary‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ Schedual‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺧﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﻳﺮﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺧﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺟﻪ ﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﺟﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ Entry‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ﮔﺎﻧﺖ ﭼﺎﺭﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪79‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : Critical tasks‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻴﺮ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Milestones‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﺴﺘﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Working Days‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -2-1-17‬ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪Cost‬‬

‫ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪ Cost‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Cash Flow‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻘﺪﻱ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﻚﺗﻚ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﺳﺘﻮﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻔﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‬
 ‫‪80‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺍﻭﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Edit‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺯﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Dlfinition‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻬﺎﻱ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰ ‪ Cost‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Budget‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Overbudget tasks‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﺟﻪ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Overbudget Resources‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Earned value‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺷﺎﺧﺺﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﺣﺎﺻﻠﻪ‬
‫)‪ (EV‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺷﺎﺧﺺﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Earned value‬ﻗﺒﻼَ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻜﺘﻪ‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ‪ Edit‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3-1-17‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪Current Activities‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺶ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :Unstrated tasks‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺭﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻧﺸﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Task starting soon‬ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ ،Data Range‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺯﻭﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪81‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ :Task in progress‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻴﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻭ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Completed tasks‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ :Should Have started tasks‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ،Should Start By‬ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲﺷﺪﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Slipping tasks‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎً ﻣﻨﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩﺍﻧﺪ‪) ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻗﺒﻼ ً ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4-1-17‬ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ‪:Assignments‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪ 4‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪:‬‬

‫‪ :Who Does What‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Work‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻛﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺎﺧﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺫﻛﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Who Does What When‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ )ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ (Work‬ﺩﺭ ﭼﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Edit‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : To Do List‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪82‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻒ ﻛﺮﺩﻩﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻲﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Overallocated Resources‬ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻛﻤﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5-1-17‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪:Workload‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ Resource Usage, Task Usage‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻱ ‪ Resurc Usage , Task Usag‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -6-1-17‬ﺩﺳﺘﺔ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪Custom‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﺨﺘﺺ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻃﺮﺍﺣﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪ Custom‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬
 ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ‪ New‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ :Task‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ‪ ،ID‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺧﺘﻢ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺶﻧﻴﺎﺯﻱ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Resource‬ﻳﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﻱ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Monthly Calendar‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﻢ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ :Cross tab‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻧﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﻤﺎﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺎﻛﻨﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ Working Days‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻳﺮ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻱ ‪ ،Edit‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Text‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺯﻳﺮ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ )ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ‪ Bnazanin‬ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ size‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻲ ﻓﻮﻧﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ‪ 12‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 14‬ﺳﺎﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﻲ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
 ‫‪85‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ - -2 17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ )‪(Visual‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ‪ 2007‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ MSP‬ﻳﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Visual Reports‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Excel‬ﻭ ‪ Visio‬ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Excel , Visio‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Project‬ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Visual Reports‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬

‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪86‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪Task usage‬‬
‫‪Resource usage‬‬
‫‪Assignment usage‬‬
‫‪Task summaty‬‬
‫‪Resource summary‬‬
‫‪Assignment summaty‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵﺩﻫﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Task usoge -1-2-17‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ Cash Flow Report‬ﺭﺍﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻭﻱ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ‪ View‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2008‬ﻭ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ‪ 29‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﮔﻪﻱ‬
‫‪ Task Usage‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻮﻻﻳﻲ )‪ (Pivot table‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2008‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ 2009‬ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﭘﺬﻳﺮﺩ ﻟﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ‪ 2008‬ﻭ ‪ 2009‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪) Quarter‬ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ(‬
‫‪ Q4‬ﻭ ‪ Q1‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﺎﺭ ‪ Q4‬ﻭ ‪ Q1‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻫﻔﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻫﻪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪) Cost‬ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ( ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻔﺘﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺠﻤﻌﻲ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺔ ‪ Chart‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻫﻔﺘﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺔ ‪ Task Usage‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Pivot table Field List‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﺠﻤﻌﻲ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Drag fields between areas below‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ‪ Pivortable‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻟﺬﺍ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺟﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﭼﺎپ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪87‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪Resource usage -2-2-17‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : cash flow Report‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Visio‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ US‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Visio‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻳﻨﭽﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ Metric‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﻠﻲﻣﺘﺮﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻓﻠﻮﭼﺎﺭﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Visio‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻠﻮﭼﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ‪ Cost ،Material‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ Work‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Resource Availability‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Visio‬ﺩﻳﺎﮔﺮﺍﻣﻲ ﺗﺮﺳﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺧﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﻣﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Resourc Cost Summary‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﺔ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪ Cost ، Material‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ‪ Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﻳﺮﻩﺍﻱ )‪(Pie Chart‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Resourcc Work Availability‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺼﺮﻓﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Resource Work Summary Report‬ﺗﻚﺗﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Work‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﺼﻮﻝ )ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ‪ Work Availability‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )‪ 8‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ( ﻭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻧﻴﺰ ‪ 101‬ﺭﻭﺯ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺍﻧﺠﺎﻣﺪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ‪ 808‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻞ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻣﻌﻤﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ‪ 88‬ﻧﻔﺮ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ Work‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ‪88‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ( ﻭ‪ Remining Availability‬ﻧﻴﺰ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -3-2-17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪:Assignment Usage‬‬

 ‫‪88‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ : Baseline Cost Report‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬

‫ﺷﺪﻩ )‪ (Baseline Cost‬ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﻪ ‪ Assignment Usage‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪ Task‬ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Baseline Report‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Visio‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Baseline Work Report‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺭﻳﺰﻱ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﺴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Budget Cost Report‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪،Cost ،Budget Cost‬‬
‫‪ Baseline Cost‬ﻭ ‪ Actual Cost‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Budget work Report‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﺷـــﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ Actual work ،Budget work ،Basline work‬ﻭ ‪ work‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Earned value over Time Report‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺭﺯﺵ ﻛﺴﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼَ ﺑﻴﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ Current‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Plan‬ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -4-2-17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪: Task summary‬‬

‫‪ :Critical tasks status Report‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺤﺮﺍﻧﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Visio‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Visio‬ﻛﻪ ﮔﺸﻮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Add Category‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Tasks‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﻲﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪ -5-2-17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪Resource Summary‬‬

‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ‪ Resource Remaining work Report‬ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬

‫ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻚﺗﻚ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Work‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫‪ -6-2-17‬ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ‪:Assignment summary‬‬

‫‪ : Resource Status Report‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪Visio‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻪﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Task Status Report‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Visio‬ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎﻱ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻫﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﺮﻱ‬

‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻲﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Visual Reports‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ‪ New Template‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬
 ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Select Application‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻛﺴﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪. Visio‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Select Data type‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻗﺒﻼً ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ‪ Select Fields‬ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ‪ Field Picker‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
 ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺷﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ‪ Remove All‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮔﻨـﺠـﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺷـﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣـﺬﻑ ﺷـﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳـﭙﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴـﻤـﺖ‬
‫‪ Available Fields‬ﺗﻚﺗﻚ ﻓﻴﻠﺪﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﺔ ‪ Add‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘ ًﺎ ‪ OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
 ‫‪92‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪MSP2010‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﻤﺪﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﮋﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﻭﺩ‪ .1384 .‬ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ‪ .Microsoft Project 2003‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﻋﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺴﻮﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﻴﻦ‪ .1385 .‬ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺵ ﮔﺎﻡ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺎﻡ ‪ .Microsoft Project 2003‬ﺗﻬﺮﺍﻥ‪ :‬ﭘﻨﺪﺍﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Microsoft Project 2007‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻨﺪﺱ ﻋﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺭﺣﻤﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻛﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺰﻭﻩ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﭘﺮﻭژﻩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺩﻛﺘﺮ ﻗﺪﺳﻲ ﭘﻮﺭ‬